diff options
| author | Christian Lohmaier <lohmaier+LibreOffice@googlemail.com> | 2016-01-25 10:24:09 +0100 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Christian Lohmaier <lohmaier+LibreOffice@googlemail.com> | 2016-01-25 13:05:57 +0100 |
| commit | cf7ed063304873b3b09c81e31ac99f161f46211d (patch) | |
| tree | 7f2f2cbec5ae965280002ab5fd65f9ab220de3aa /source/text/swriter | |
| parent | 5ca73073d54e8594e36e0390eb763e4246ac7faa (diff) | |
remove multiple spaces (and save with helpauthoring extension)
Change-Id: Ic5d12de95d9265ed411ddc8e56f1db3e150765bf
Diffstat (limited to 'source/text/swriter')
50 files changed, 3144 insertions, 3121 deletions
diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp index 02db1dc188..ddca848893 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -39,8 +39,7 @@ <embed href="text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp#steuerzeichen"/> </section> <paragraph id="par_id3145410" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in.</paragraph> -<paragraph id="par_id3147511" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To specify which non-printing characters are displayed, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item> -</caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - <link href="text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp" name="Writer - Formatting Aids">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</link></emph>, and then select the options that you want in the <emph>Display of</emph> area.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147511" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To specify which non-printing characters are displayed, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - </emph><link href="text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp" name="Writer - Formatting Aids"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</emph></link>, and then select the options that you want in the <emph>Display of</emph> area.</paragraph> </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp index 90bd9f013f..0d5284dfb8 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,83 +16,87 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideanchor_objectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Positioning Objects</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147828"><bookmark_value>objects;anchoring options</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>positioning;objects (guide)</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>anchors;options</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>frames;anchoring options</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>pictures;anchoring options</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>centering;images on HTML pages</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideanchor_objectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Positioning Objects</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147828"> + <bookmark_value>objects;anchoring options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>positioning;objects (guide)</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>anchors;options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames;anchoring options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pictures;anchoring options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>centering;images on HTML pages</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147828" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="45"><variable id="anchor_object"><link href="text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp" name="Positioning Objects">Positioning Objects</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147251" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="46">You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available:</paragraph> - <table id="tbl_id3147268"> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145599" role="tablehead" l10n="U" oldref="47">Anchoring</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145622" role="tablehead" l10n="U" oldref="48">Effect</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145650" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="49">As character</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151181" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="50">Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10674" role="tablecontent" l10n="NEW">To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151212" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="51">To character</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151235" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="52">Anchors the selected item to a character.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155071" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="53">To paragraph</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155094" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="54">Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155122" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="55">To page</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155144" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="56">Anchors the selected item to the current page.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145674" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="57">To frame</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145697" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="58">Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - </table> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145715" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="59">When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the <item type="menuitem">Anchor</item> - submenu.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> - </section> - </body> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147828" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="anchor_object"><link href="text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp" name="Positioning Objects">Positioning Objects</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147251" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available:</paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3147268"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145599" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Anchoring</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145622" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Effect</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145650" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">As character</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151181" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_idN10674" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151212" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To character</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151235" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected item to a character.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155071" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To paragraph</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155094" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155122" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To page</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155144" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected item to the current page.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145674" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To frame</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145697" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph id="par_id3145715" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the <item type="menuitem">Anchor</item> submenu.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index 1fdd3f9176..0bdb6ab5f7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,94 +16,98 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideautotextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using AutoText</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155521"><bookmark_value>AutoText</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>networks and AutoText directories</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>lists;AutoText shortcuts</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>printing;AutoText shortcuts</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>inserting;text blocks</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>text blocks</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>blocks of text</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideautotextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using AutoText</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155521"> + <bookmark_value>AutoText</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>networks and AutoText directories</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lists;AutoText shortcuts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>printing;AutoText shortcuts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;text blocks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text blocks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>blocks of text</bookmark_value> </bookmark> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/insertautotextdialog/InsertAutoTextDialog" id="bm_id3148685" localize="false"/> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155521" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="26"><variable id="autotext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp" name="Using AutoText">Using AutoText</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150534" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155539" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="48">To To Create an AutoText Entry</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155560" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155581" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="57">Choose - <item type="menuitem">Edit - AutoText</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147761" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="58">Select the category where you want to store the AutoText.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147779" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="59">Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147807" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="60">Click the <emph>AutoText</emph> button, and then choose <emph>New</emph>. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10732" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Close</emph> button.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147282" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="39">To Insert an AutoText Entry</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145597" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="61">Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145615" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText"><emph>Edit - AutoText</emph></link>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145644" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click - <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145668" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="30">You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">AutoText</item> - icon on the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155090" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="43">To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type <item type="literal">fn</item>, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type <item type="literal">dt</item>, and then press F3. </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155115" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="45">To Print a List of AutoText Entries</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155160" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="62">In the <emph>Macro from</emph> tree control, select %PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151277" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="63">Select "Main" in the <emph>Existing macros in: AutoText</emph> list and then click <emph>Run</emph>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151304" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151327" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="49">Using AutoText in Network Installations</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151355" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="50">You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151370" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="51">For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151390" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="52">The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154960" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="53">Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154995" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="42"><link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText">Edit - AutoText</link></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155012" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="46"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp" name="Word Completion">Word Completion</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> -</helpdocument> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155521" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="autotext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp" name="Using AutoText">Using AutoText</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150534" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155539" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To To Create an AutoText Entry</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155560" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155581" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - AutoText</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147761" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the category where you want to store the AutoText.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147779" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147807" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>AutoText</emph> button, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10732" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Close</emph> button.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147282" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert an AutoText Entry</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145597" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145615" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText"><emph>Edit - AutoText</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145644" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3145668" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">AutoText</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> bar, and then choose an AutoText entry.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155090" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type <item type="literal">fn</item>, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type <item type="literal">dt</item>, and then press F3.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155115" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Print a List of AutoText Entries</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155160" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Macro from</emph> tree control, select %PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151277" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Main" in the <emph>Existing macros in: AutoText</emph> list and then click <emph>Run</emph>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151304" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3151327" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Using AutoText in Network Installations</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3151355" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3151370" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3151390" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154960" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph id="par_id3154995" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText">Edit - AutoText</link></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155012" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp" name="Word Completion">Word Completion</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp index 71babbbd8c..297bcee84d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,39 +16,43 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidecalculatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Calculating in Text Documents</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149909"><bookmark_value>calculating; in text</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>formulas; calculating in text</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>references;in Writer tables</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "formula bar in text"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149909" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="calculate"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp" name="Calculating in Text Documents">Calculating in Text Documents</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149949" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149972" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155547" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, <item type="literal">=10000/12</item>, and then press Enter.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155565" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can also click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> - icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item>, and then choose a function for your formula.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8316904" role="note" l10n="NEW">To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating in Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149909"> + <bookmark_value>calculating; in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formulas; calculating in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>references;in Writer tables</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "formula bar in text"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149909" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="calculate"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp" name="Calculating in Text Documents">Calculating in Text Documents</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149949" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149972" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155547" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, <item type="literal">=10000/12</item>, and then press Enter.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155565" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item>, and then choose a function for your formula.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id8316904" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index c5d146021f..2ca20390ba 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,46 +16,49 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147406"><bookmark_value>formulas; complex formulas in text</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>calculating;formulas/mean values</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147406" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="20"><variable id="calculate_intext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp" name="Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145245" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="25">You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152901" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="26">For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following:</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145078" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156382" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> - icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149692" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|).</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149481" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149823" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="35">To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp#calculate_intext2"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147406"> + <bookmark_value>formulas; complex formulas in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>calculating;formulas/mean values</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147406" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="calculate_intext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp" name="Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145245" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3152901" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following:</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145078" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156382" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149692" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149481" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3149823" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp#calculate_intext2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp index 4dd201a3ce..9414f743e5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,59 +16,62 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidecaptionsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Captions </title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147691"><bookmark_value>inserting; captions</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>captions; inserting and editing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>editing;captions</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>objects; captioning</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>tables; labeling</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>frames; labeling</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>charts; labeling</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>text frames; labeling</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>draw objects; inserting captions</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>legends, see also captions</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "adding;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147691" role="paragraph" l10n="E" oldref="21" - localize="false"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150537" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="39"><variable id="captions"><link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Using Captions">Using Captions</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153156" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="22">In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153172" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="36">You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153186" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="37">When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10713" role="tip" l10n="NEW">To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155541" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="23">To define a caption proceed as follows:</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155567" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Select the item that you want to add a caption to.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147765" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Select the options that you want, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>. If you want, you can also enter different text in the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> - box, for example <item type="literal">Figure</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147254" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can edit caption text directly in the document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147271" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="28">A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145671" role="tip" l10n="CHG" oldref="45">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose <emph><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> - <embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidecaptionsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Captions </title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147691"> + <bookmark_value>inserting; captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>captions; inserting and editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; captioning</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>charts; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text frames; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>draw objects; inserting captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>legends, see also captions</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "adding;"</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id3147691" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150537" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="captions"><link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Using Captions">Using Captions</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153156" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153172" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153186" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN10713" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="hd_id3155541" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To define a caption proceed as follows:</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155567" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the item that you want to add a caption to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147765" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the options that you want, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>. If you want, you can also enter different text in the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> box, for example <item type="literal">Figure</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3147254" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">You can edit caption text directly in the document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147271" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145671" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose <emph><switchinline select="sys"></emph><emph><caseinline select="MAC"></emph><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph><emph> +</caseinline></emph><emph><defaultinline></emph><emph>Tools - Options</emph><emph></defaultinline></emph><emph></switchinline></emph><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index b37aecbbb9..43334e4259 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -47,21 +47,16 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150527" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select a caption title from the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> - box, and select a numbering style in the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> - box. <br/>You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the <item type="menuitem">Caption</item> - box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150527" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select a caption title from the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> box, and select a numbering style in the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> box. <br/>You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the <item type="menuitem">Caption</item> box.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153166" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <emph>Options</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> - box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155553" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the - <item type="menuitem">Separator</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155553" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the <item type="menuitem">Separator</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <emph>Caption</emph> dialog, click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp index 93e1a38416..7b4c8915ce 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,63 +16,64 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidechange_headerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3146875"><bookmark_value>headers; inserting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>footers; inserting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>page styles; changing from selection</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>new page styles from selection</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "creating;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3146875" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="21"><variable id="change_header"><link href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp" name="Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page">Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153584" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22">You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154245" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="24">For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Open a new text document, choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and then click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150532" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">Click the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon and select <emph>New Styles from Selection</emph> from the submenu.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Type a name for the page in the <item type="menuitem">Style name</item> - box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153184" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155541" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and choose the new page style from the list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155572" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155592" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147771" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - area, select <item type="menuitem">Page break</item> and then select “Default” from the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147810" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidechange_headerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3146875"> + <bookmark_value>headers; inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers; inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page styles; changing from selection</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>new page styles from selection</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "creating;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3146875" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="change_header"><link href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp" name="Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page">Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153584" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154245" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open a new text document, choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and then click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150532" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> icon and select <emph>New Styles from Selection</emph> from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the page in the <item type="menuitem">Style name</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153184" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155541" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and choose the new page style from the list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155572" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155592" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147771" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Page break</item> and then select “Default” from the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147810" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index 643ebbf42f..a639c01e29 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,72 +16,73 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidechapter_numberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Outline Numbering</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147682"><bookmark_value>outlines;numbering</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>deleting;heading numbers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>chapter numbering</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>headings; numbering/paragraph styles</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>numbering;headings</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entry</comment><comment>mw reduced two "headings;" bookmarks to one entry</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147682" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="22"><variable id="chapter_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp" name="Outline Numbering">Outline Numbering</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155605" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="23">You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155626" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="35">To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155891" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Style</item> - box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150513" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the - <item type="menuitem">Numbers</item> box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click - <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107CE" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Remove Automatic Outline Numbering From a Heading Paragraph</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D5" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D9" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Press the <item type="keycode">Backspace</item> key to delete the number.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155552" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="26">To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155571" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147758" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147782" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the - <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147808" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#insert_tab_innumbering"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/><comment>mw inserted new link under "Related topics" and deleted "To rearrange the headings in a text document"</comment> + <topic id="textswriterguidechapter_numberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Outline Numbering</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147682"> + <bookmark_value>outlines;numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;heading numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>chapter numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headings; numbering/paragraph styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbering;headings</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entry</comment><comment>mw reduced two "headings;" bookmarks to one entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147682" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="chapter_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp" name="Outline Numbering">Outline Numbering</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155605" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155626" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155891" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Style</item> box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150513" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbers</item> box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="par_idN107CE" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Remove Automatic Outline Numbering From a Heading Paragraph</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN107D5" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN107D9" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Press the Backspace key to delete the number.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155552" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155571" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Outline Numbering</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147758" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147782" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147808" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#insert_tab_innumbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/><comment>mw inserted new link under "Related topics" and deleted "To rearrange the headings in a text document"</comment> </body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index c4cd2455a5..4288cca8da 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,97 +16,100 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideconditional_textxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Conditional Text</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155619"><bookmark_value>matching conditional text in fields</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>if-then queries as fields</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>conditional text; setting up</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>text; conditional text</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>defining;conditions</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideconditional_textxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155619"> + <bookmark_value>matching conditional text in fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>if-then queries as fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>conditional text; setting up</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; conditional text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;conditions</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155619" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="4"><variable id="conditional_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp" name="Conditional Text">Conditional Text</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155879" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="6">Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153175" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="61">To Define a Conditional Variable</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153185" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="62">The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. </paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155566" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147759" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click "Set variable" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147784" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type a name for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box, for example <item type="literal">Reminder</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147810" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="57">Click "Text" in the - <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7748344" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Enter <item type="literal">1</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.<br/>The Format list now displays a "General" format.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145645" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="63">To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145659" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="64">The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151193" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151212" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="65">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151250" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click "Conditional text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155936" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Type <item type="literal">Reminder EQ "3"</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> - box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155969" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150446" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150473" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155073" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="66">To Display the Conditional Text</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155086" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="67">In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Replace the number in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> - box with 3, and then click - <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155168" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">If the field does not automatically update, press F9.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp#defining_conditions"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145714" role="paragraph" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of conditional operators">List of conditional operators</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155619" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="conditional_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp" name="Conditional Text">Conditional Text</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155879" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155895" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153175" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Define a Conditional Variable</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153185" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155566" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147759" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Set variable" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147784" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box, for example <item type="literal">Reminder</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147810" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Text" in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7748344" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter <item type="literal">1</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.<br/>The Format list now displays a "General" format.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145645" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145659" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151193" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151212" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151250" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Conditional text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155936" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Reminder EQ "3"</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155969" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150446" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150473" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155073" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Display the Conditional Text</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155086" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Replace the number in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box with 3, and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155168" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If the field does not automatically update, press F9.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp#defining_conditions"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3145714" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of conditional operators">List of conditional operators</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index 66392ef9ae..33a2a4a291 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,52 +16,56 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideconditional_text2xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Conditional Text for Page Counts</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153108"><bookmark_value>page counts</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>conditional text;page counts</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideconditional_text2xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text for Page Counts</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153108"> + <bookmark_value>page counts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>conditional text;page counts</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153108" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="conditional_text2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp" name="Conditional Text for Page Counts">Conditional Text for Page Counts</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156228" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="3">You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156257" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150513" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Page Count</item>, and then enter a space.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153166" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click "Conditional text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145256" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Type <item type="literal">Page > 1</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145280" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type <item type="literal">Pages</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Then</item> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145305" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Type <item type="literal">Page</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Else</item> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155535" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp#defining_conditions"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153108" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="conditional_text2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp" name="Conditional Text for Page Counts">Conditional Text for Page Counts</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3156228" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156257" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150513" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - Page Count</item>, and then enter a space.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153166" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Conditional text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145256" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Page > 1</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145280" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Pages</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Then</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145305" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Page</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Else</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155535" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp#defining_conditions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp index f70d3ccd74..c5f10adc59 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,36 +16,40 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidedelete_from_dictxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147688"><bookmark_value>user-defined dictionaries; removing words from</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>custom dictionaries; removing words from</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..."</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147688" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="13"><variable id="delete_from_dict"><link href="text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp" name="Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary">Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <emph><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - Language Settings - Writing Aids</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151391" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the <item type="menuitem">User-defined</item> - list, and then click <item type="menuitem">Edit</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select the word that you want to delete in the <emph>Word</emph> list, and then click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidedelete_from_dictxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147688"> + <bookmark_value>user-defined dictionaries; removing words from</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>custom dictionaries; removing words from</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..."</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147688" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="delete_from_dict"><link href="text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp" name="Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary">Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph><switchinline select="sys"></emph><emph><caseinline select="MAC"></emph><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph><emph> +</caseinline></emph><emph><defaultinline></emph><emph>Tools - Options</emph><emph></defaultinline></emph><emph></switchinline></emph><emph> - Language Settings - Writing Aids</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151391" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the <item type="menuitem">User-defined</item> list, and then click <item type="menuitem">Edit</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the word that you want to delete in the <emph>Word</emph> list, and then click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 6b259867c8..49013720ec 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,86 +16,92 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideeven_odd_sdwxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153407"><bookmark_value>page styles; left and right pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>blank pages with alternating page styles</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>empty page with alternating page styles</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>pages; left and right pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>formatting; even/odd pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>title pages; page styles</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>First Page page style</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>Left Page page style</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>right pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>even/odd pages;formatting</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries.</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153407" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="even_odd_sdw"><link href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp" name="Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <table id="tbl_id3152897"> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154265" role="paragraph" l10n="E"> -<image id="img_id3155876" src="cmd/sc_designerdialog.png" width="0.1862in" height="0.1862in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3155876">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147126" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph> at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - </table> + <topic id="textswriterguideeven_odd_sdwxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153407"> + <bookmark_value>page styles; left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>blank pages with alternating page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>empty page with alternating page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages; left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting; even/odd pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>title pages; page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>First Page page style</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Left Page page style</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>even/odd pages;formatting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries.</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153407" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="even_odd_sdw"><link href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp" name="Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</link></variable></paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3152897"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3154265" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> <image id="img_id3155876" src="cmd/sc_designerdialog.png" width="0.473cm" height="0.473cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3155876">Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147126" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph> at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id8194219" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Set Up Alternating Page Styles</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150526" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153179" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145267" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Right Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145299" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155529" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Left Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155561" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155588" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To add a header to one of the page styles, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header</item>, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147772" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item>, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147254" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id888698" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3394573" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7594225" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph><switchinline select="sys"></emph><emph><caseinline select="MAC"></emph><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph><emph> +</caseinline></emph><emph><defaultinline></emph><emph>Tools - Options</emph><emph></defaultinline></emph><emph></switchinline></emph><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - </emph><emph>Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id8147221" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Remove the check mark from <emph>Print automatically inserted blank pages</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3145596" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id8194219" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Set Up Alternating Page Styles</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150526" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> - icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153179" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145267" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select "Right Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145299" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155529" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select "Left Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155561" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155588" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="19">To add a header to one of the page styles, choose - <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header</item>, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147772" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="20">To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose - <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item>, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147254" role="tip" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id888698" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3394573" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7594225" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8147221" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Remove the check mark from <emph>Print automatically inserted blank pages</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145596" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="13"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp index 6aa0c0548f..485cd12973 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,41 +16,43 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidefields_datexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id5111545"><bookmark_value>inserting;date fields</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>dates;inserting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>date fields;fixed/variable</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>fixed dates</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>variable dates</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidefields_datexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id5111545"> + <bookmark_value>inserting;date fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>dates;inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>date fields;fixed/variable</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>fixed dates</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>variable dates</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155165" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="fields_date"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp" name="Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field">Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154491" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147679" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153415" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Click “Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - list and do one of the following:</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155602" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> - list.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154241" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp#fields_enter"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155165" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="fields_date"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp" name="Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field">Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154491" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147679" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153415" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click “Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list and do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155602" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3154241" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp#fields_enter"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp index 912d5ad4c6..14aebbcd9d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,42 +16,45 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidefields_enterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Adding Input Fields</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155916"><bookmark_value>text; input fields</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>fields; input fields in text</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>input fields in text</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>inserting;input fields</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155916" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="fields_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp" name="Adding Input Fields">Adding Input Fields</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153409" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145776" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item> - and click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Click “Input field”in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154257" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> - and type the text for the variable.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150708" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="4">To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidefields_enterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Input Fields</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155916"> + <bookmark_value>text; input fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>fields; input fields in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>input fields in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;input fields</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155916" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="fields_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp" name="Adding Input Fields">Adding Input Fields</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153409" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145776" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click “Input field”in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154257" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and type the text for the variable.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3150708" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp index 460bab484d..b8721564d5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,211 +16,217 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidefields_userdataxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153398"><bookmark_value>fields; user data</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>user data; querying</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>conditions; user data fields</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>hiding;text, from specific users</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>text; hiding from specific users, with conditions</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>user variables in conditions/fields</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidefields_userdataxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153398"> + <bookmark_value>fields; user data</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>user data; querying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>conditions; user data fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hiding;text, from specific users</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; hiding from specific users, with conditions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>user variables in conditions/fields</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153398" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="59"><variable id="fields_userdata"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp" name="Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions">Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154239" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="60">You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators:</paragraph> - <table id="tbl_id3154255"> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155889" role="tablehead" l10n="U" oldref="94">Operator</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147110" role="tablehead" l10n="U" oldref="95">Meaning</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150508" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="96">== or EQ</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150531" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="97">equals</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150725" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="98">!= or NEQ</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150748" role="tablecontent" l10n="U" oldref="99">is not equal to</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - </table> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153167" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="101">If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="102">Select the text in the document that you want to hide.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145273" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="103">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145297" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="104">In the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> - area, select the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> check box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155533" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="105">In the <emph>With Condition</emph> box, type <emph>user_lastname == "Doe"</emph>, where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155573" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="107">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then save the document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147760" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="108">The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147777" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="61">The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field:</paragraph> - <table id="tbl_id3147793"> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147819" role="tablehead" l10n="U" oldref="62">User variables</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147218" role="tablehead" l10n="U" oldref="63">Meaning</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147245" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="64">user_firstname</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147268" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="65">First name</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145592" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="66">user_lastname</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145615" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="67">Last name</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145642" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="68">user_initials</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145666" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="69">Initials</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151200" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="70">user_company</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151223" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="71">Company</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151250" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="72">user_street</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152912" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="73">Street</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152940" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="74">user_country</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152963" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="75">Country</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152990" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="76">user_zipcode</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145679" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="77">Zip Code</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145706" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="78">user_city</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145729" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="79">City</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145756" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="80">user_title</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145779" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="81">Title</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156284" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="82">user_position</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156307" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="83">Position</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156334" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="84">user_tel_work</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156357" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="85">Business telephone number</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156384" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="86">user_tel_home</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149728" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="87">Home telephone number</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149756" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="88">user_fax</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149778" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="89">Fax number</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149806" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="90">user_email</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147294" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="91">E-mail address</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147321" role="code" l10n="U" oldref="92">user_state</paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147344" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="93">State</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - </table> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp#hidden_text"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147392" role="paragraph" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of operators">List of operators</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> +<paragraph id="hd_id3153398" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="fields_userdata"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp" name="Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions">Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154239" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators:</paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3154255"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155889" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Operator</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147110" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Meaning</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150508" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">== or EQ</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150531" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">equals</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150725" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">!= or NEQ</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150748" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">is not equal to</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph id="par_id3153167" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text in the document that you want to hide.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145273" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145297" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> area, select the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155533" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>With Condition</emph> box, type <emph>user_lastname == "Doe"</emph>, where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155573" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then save the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3147760" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147777" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field:</paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3147793"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147819" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">User variables</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147218" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Meaning</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147245" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_firstname</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147268" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">First name</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145592" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_lastname</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145615" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Last name</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145642" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_initials</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145666" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Initials</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151200" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_company</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151223" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Company</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151250" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_street</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152912" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Street</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152940" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_country</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152963" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Country</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152990" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_zipcode</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145679" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Zip Code</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145706" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_city</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145729" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">City</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145756" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_title</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145779" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Title</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156284" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_position</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156307" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Position</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156334" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_tel_work</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156357" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Business telephone number</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156384" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_tel_home</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149728" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Home telephone number</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149756" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_fax</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149778" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Fax number</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149806" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_email</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147294" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">E-mail address</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147321" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_state</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147344" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">State</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp#hidden_text"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3147392" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of operators">List of operators</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp index b5b40129f1..e580fe2e5c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,48 +16,52 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidefooter_nextpagexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"><bookmark_value>pages; continuation pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>next page number in footers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>continuation pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>page numbers; continuation pages</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidefooter_nextpagexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"> + <bookmark_value>pages; continuation pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>next page number in footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>continuation pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page numbers; continuation pages</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145819" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="footer_nextpage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp" name="Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages">Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154242" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154256" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="4">The page number is only displayed if the following page exists.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Place the cursor in the footer and choose <emph>Insert - Fields - More Fields</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147134" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">In the <emph>Fields</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150955" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click 'Page' in the <emph>Type</emph> list and 'Next page' in the <emph>Select</emph> list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150517" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click a numbering style in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> - list.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">If you select 'Text' in the <emph>Format</emph> list, only the text that you enter in the <emph>Value</emph> box is displayed in the field.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150727" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>Insert</emph> to insert the field with the page number.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp#footer_pagenumber"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145819" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="footer_nextpage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp" name="Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages">Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154242" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154256" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The page number is only displayed if the following page exists.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor in the footer and choose <emph>Insert - Fields - More Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147134" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Fields</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150955" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click 'Page' in the <emph>Type</emph> list and 'Next page' in the <emph>Select</emph> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150517" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click a numbering style in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you select 'Text' in the <emph>Format</emph> list, only the text that you enter in the <emph>Value</emph> box is displayed in the field.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150727" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> to insert the field with the page number.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp#footer_pagenumber"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index d6286e962c..e53dbe20a9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,97 +16,99 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - +--> <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_usagexml" indexer="include"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"><bookmark_value>endnotes;inserting and editing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>inserting;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>deleting;footnotes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>editing;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>organizing;footnotes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>footnotes; inserting and editing</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "removing;.."</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145819" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="16"><variable id="footnote_usage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp" name="Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154258" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="14">Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155881" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="24">To Insert a Footnote or Endnote</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155903" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147120" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><emph>Insert - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150937" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> area, select the format that you want to use. If you select <item type="menuitem">Character</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Choose</item> button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150508" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - area, select <item type="menuitem">Footnote</item> - or <item type="menuitem">Endnote</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150704" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150729" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Type the note.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <table id="tbl_id3150745"> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148843" role="paragraph" l10n="E"> -<image id="img_id3148857" src="cmd/sc_insertfootnote.png" width="0.222in" height="0.222in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148857">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153176" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">You can also insert footnotes by clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon on the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - </table> + <topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_usagexml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"> + <bookmark_value>endnotes;inserting and editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;footnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>organizing;footnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footnotes; inserting and editing</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "removing;.."</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145819" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="footnote_usage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp" name="Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154258" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155881" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Footnote or Endnote</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155903" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147120" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><emph>Insert - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150937" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> area, select the format that you want to use. If you select <item type="menuitem">Character</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Choose</item> button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150508" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Footnote</item> or <item type="menuitem">Endnote</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150704" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150729" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the note.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<table id="tbl_id3150745"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3148843" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> <image id="img_id3148857" src="cmd/sc_insertfootnote.png" width="0.564cm" height="0.564cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148857">Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3153176" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also insert footnotes by clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon on the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155543" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Edit a Footnote or Endnote</paragraph> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150167" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155563" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145029" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+T +</caseinline><defaultinline>F11</defaultinline></switchinline> to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145062" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145081" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><emph>Edit - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147776" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><emph>Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147813" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147232" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp#footnote_with_line"/> +</body> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155543" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="28">To Edit a Footnote or Endnote</paragraph> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150167" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155563" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145029" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+T</caseinline><defaultinline>F11</defaultinline></switchinline> to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145062" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145081" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><emph>Edit - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147776" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><emph>Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes</emph></link>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147813" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147232" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp#footnote_with_line"/> - </body> </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp index aac9a97ee6..7d6ec522bd 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,65 +16,64 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_with_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Spacing Between Footnotes</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147683"><bookmark_value>spacing; endnotes/footnotes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>endnotes; spacing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>footnotes; spacing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>borders;for footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>lines;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_with_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Spacing Between Footnotes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147683"> + <bookmark_value>spacing; endnotes/footnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>endnotes; spacing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footnotes; spacing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders;for footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147683" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="40"><variable id="footnote_with_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp" name="Spacing Between Footnotes">Spacing Between Footnotes</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145808" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="39">If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155603" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click in a footnote or endnote.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154251" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Borders"><emph>Borders</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">In the <item type="menuitem">Default</item> - area, click the <item type="menuitem">Set Top and Bottom Borders Only</item> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">In the <item type="menuitem">Line</item> area, click a line in the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150961" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">Select "White" in the <item type="menuitem">Color</item> - box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150519" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <emph>Spacing to contents</emph> area, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> check box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150709" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Enter a value in the <item type="menuitem">Top</item> - and <item type="menuitem">Bottom</item> - boxes.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150740" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp#footnote_usage"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148846" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="49"><link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Format - Paragraph - Borders">Format - Paragraph - Borders</link></paragraph> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147683" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="footnote_with_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp" name="Spacing Between Footnotes">Spacing Between Footnotes</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145808" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155603" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in a footnote or endnote.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154251" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Borders"><emph>Borders</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Default</item> area, click the <item type="menuitem">Set Top and Bottom Borders Only</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Line</item> area, click a line in the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150961" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "White" in the <item type="menuitem">Color</item> box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150519" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Spacing to contents</emph> area, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150709" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a value in the <item type="menuitem">Top</item> and <item type="menuitem">Bottom</item> boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150740" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp#footnote_usage"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3148846" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Format - Paragraph - Borders">Format - Paragraph - Borders</link></paragraph> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp index b53336556f..b70d8f893a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,163 +16,154 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideglobaldoc_howtosxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145246"><bookmark_value>Navigator;master documents</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>master documents;creating/editing/exporting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>subdocuments;creating/editing/removing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>removing;subdocuments</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>indexes; master documents</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.</comment><comment>MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145246" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="4"><variable id="globaldoc_howtos"><link href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp">Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments</link> -</variable></paragraph><comment>MW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1522873" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153127" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="29">To Create a Master Document</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> + <topic id="textswriterguideglobaldoc_howtosxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145246"> + <bookmark_value>Navigator;master documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>master documents;creating/editing/exporting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>subdocuments;creating/editing/removing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>removing;subdocuments</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>indexes; master documents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.</comment><comment>MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries</comment> +<paragraph id="hd_id3145246" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="globaldoc_howtos"><link href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp">Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments</link></variable></paragraph><comment>MW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id1522873" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="hd_id3153127" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Master Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> <list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149956" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>File - New - Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> -</listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149956" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - New - Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149612" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open an existing document and choose <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149612" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Open an existing document and choose <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> -</listitem> +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a <item type="menuitem">Text</item> entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Navigator</item> for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> icon, and do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> </list> +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose <emph>File</emph>, locate the file that you want to include, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145405" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To create a new subdocument, choose <emph>New Document</emph>, type a name for the file, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id8550981" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert some text between subdocuments, choose <emph>Text</emph>. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153382" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="hd_id3154242" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Edit a Master Document</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered" startwith="2"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149873" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a <item type="menuitem">Text</item> - entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145114" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">In the <item type="menuitem">Navigator</item> for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> - icon, and do one of the following:</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155879" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> <list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156240" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose <emph>File</emph>, locate the file that you want to include, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> -</listitem> - -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145405" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">To create a new subdocument, choose <emph>New Document</emph>, type a name for the file, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> -</listitem> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id8550981" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG">To insert some text between subdocuments, choose <emph>Text</emph>. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> -</listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155931" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148677" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149982" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the <item type="menuitem">Move down</item> or <item type="menuitem">Move up</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153022" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<table id="tbl_id3154206"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3148949" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> <image id="img_id3148959" src="sw/imglst/sc20246.png" width="0.473cm" height="0.473cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148959">Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3153632" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph id="par_idN10C40" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the <emph>Format - (Object type) - Type</emph> tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the <emph>Horizontal</emph> and <emph>Vertical</emph> list boxes.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153656" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3152760" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153876" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the master document, choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153907" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149770" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Breaks</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then select “Page”in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150224" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145205" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145228" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Export a Master Document as a <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Text Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150315" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Export</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148580" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>File format</emph> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Export</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> </list> +<paragraph id="par_id8371227" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections</item> to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3154382" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator in master mode">Navigator in master mode</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> - <list type="ordered" startwith="4"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153382" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154242" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="37">To Edit a Master Document</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document.</paragraph> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155879" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="38">To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155931" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="39">To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148677" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149982" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the <item type="menuitem">Move down</item> or <item type="menuitem">Move up</item> - icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153022" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <table id="tbl_id3154206"> - <tablerow> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148949" role="paragraph" l10n="E"> -<image id="img_id3148959" src="sw/imglst/sc20246.png" width="0.1862in" height="0.1862in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148959">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph> - </tablecell> - <tablecell> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153632" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="21">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </tablecell> - </tablerow> - </table> - - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10C40" role="note" l10n="NEW">When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the <emph>Format - (Object type) - Type</emph> tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the <emph>Horizontal</emph> and <emph>Vertical</emph> list boxes.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153656" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" - oldref="41">To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152760" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153876" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">In the master document, choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149770" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="46">In the <item type="menuitem">Breaks</item> - area, select <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then select “Page”in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150224" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145205" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145228" role="heading" level="3" l10n="CHG" - oldref="48">To Export a Master Document as a <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Text Document</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150315" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Export</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148580" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <emph>File format</emph> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Export</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8371227" role="note" l10n="NEW">The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections</item> to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154382" role="paragraph" l10n="C"><link href="text/shared/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator in master mode">Navigator in master mode</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index 32ece1e320..eb787e97a4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,54 +16,56 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideheader_footerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">About Headers and Footers</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155863"><bookmark_value>headers;about</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>footers;about</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>HTML documents; headers and footers</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_footerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">About Headers and Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155863"> + <bookmark_value>headers;about</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers;about</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>HTML documents; headers and footers</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155863" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="38"><variable id="header_footer"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp" name="About Headers and Footers">About Headers and Footers</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="35">Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields">Fields</link>, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150511" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="44">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>.</paragraph> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155896" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">To add a header to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147119" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">To add a footer to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153726" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">You can also choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer</item> - tab, and then select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> - or <item type="menuitem">Footer on</item>. Clear the <item type="menuitem">Same content left/right</item> check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146876" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different <link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link>, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150704" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="41">Headers and Footers in HTML Documents</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150717" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="34">Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. </paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153174" role="paragraph" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155863" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_footer"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp" name="About Headers and Footers">About Headers and Footers</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields">Fields</link>, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150511" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>.</paragraph> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155896" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a header to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147119" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a footer to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153726" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">You can also choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer</item> tab, and then select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer on</item>. Clear the <item type="menuitem">Same content left/right</item> check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146876" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different <link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link>, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150704" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Headers and Footers in HTML Documents</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150717" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3153174" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index 224ef8e95b..183a2fe16f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,85 +16,80 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideheader_pagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Defining Different Headers and Footers</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155920"><bookmark_value>headers;defining for left and right pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>footers;defining for left and right pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>page styles; changing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>defining; headers/footers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>mirrored page layout</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_pagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Different Headers and Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155920"> + <bookmark_value>headers;defining for left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers;defining for left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page styles; changing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining; headers/footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>mirrored page layout</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155920" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="25"><variable id="header_pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Defining Different Headers and Footers">Defining Different Headers and Footers</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154263" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="26">You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as <emph>First page</emph>, <emph>Left page</emph> and <emph>Right page</emph>, or you can create a custom page style.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147105" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, click the - <item type="menuitem">Page</item> tab, and in the - <item type="menuitem">Layout settings</item> area, choose “Mirrored” in the - <item type="menuitem">Page layout</item> box.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150224" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="28">For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150929" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Open a new text document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph> and click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150536" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153750" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Select - <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146865" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> - box, select "Left Page".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146889" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150714" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150748" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153172" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Select - <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147061" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> - box, select "Right Page".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147086" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145263" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145284" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. </paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155920" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Defining Different Headers and Footers">Defining Different Headers and Footers</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154263" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as <emph>First page</emph>, <emph>Left page</emph> and <emph>Right page</emph>, or you can create a custom page style.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147105" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Page</item> tab, and in the <item type="menuitem">Layout settings</item> area, choose “Mirrored” in the <item type="menuitem">Page layout</item> box.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150224" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150929" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open a new text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph> and click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150536" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153750" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146865" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, select "Left Page".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146889" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150714" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150748" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153172" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147061" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, select "Right Page".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147086" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145263" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145284" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp index 4931018379..89aab28197 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,84 +16,83 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideheader_with_chapterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155919"><bookmark_value>running titles in headers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>floating titles in headers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>headers; chapter information</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>chapter names in headers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>names; chapter names in headers</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_with_chapterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155919"> + <bookmark_value>running titles in headers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>floating titles in headers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headers; chapter information</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>chapter names in headers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>names; chapter names in headers</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155919" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="3"><variable id="header_with_chapter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp" name="Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer">Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153414" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22">Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154244" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="23">To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155898" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> - box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the <item type="menuitem">Number</item> - box, for example, "1,2,3...".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150219" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the <item type="menuitem">Before</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150245" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Enter a space in the <item type="menuitem">After</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150949" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150505" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="30">To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150527" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153729" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header</item> - or <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153762" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click in the header or footer.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146863" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item> and click the - <item type="menuitem">Document</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153175" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Click "Chapter" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - list and "Chapter number and name" in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147065" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147095" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155919" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_with_chapter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp" name="Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer">Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153414" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154244" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155874" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155898" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the <item type="menuitem">Number</item> box, for example, "1,2,3...".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150219" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the <item type="menuitem">Before</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150245" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a space in the <item type="menuitem">After</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150949" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150505" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150527" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153729" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Insert - Footer</item>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153762" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the header or footer.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146863" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Document</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153175" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Chapter" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list and "Chapter number and name" in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147065" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3147095" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp index e1e9923371..797c227b80 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,59 +16,54 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideheader_with_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Formatting Headers or Footers</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154866"><bookmark_value>inserting;lines under headers/above footers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>lines; under headers/above footers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>headers;formatting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>footers;formatting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>shadows;headers/footers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>borders;for headers/footers</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW changed "inserting;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154866" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="20"><variable id="header_with_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp" name="Formatting Headers or Footers">Formatting Headers or Footers</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154243" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="21">You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155873" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item> - and select the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> - or <item type="menuitem">Footer</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Set the spacing options that you want to use.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147128" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click <item type="menuitem">More</item>. The <item type="menuitem">Border/Background</item> - dialog opens.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_with_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Formatting Headers or Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> -<list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150520" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the <emph>Line arrangement</emph> area. Click a line style in the <emph>Style</emph> box.</paragraph> -</listitem> +<body> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153742" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> box, and then enter a value in the<emph> Bottom</emph> box.</paragraph> -</listitem> -</list> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154866"> + <bookmark_value>inserting;lines under headers/above footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines; under headers/above footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headers;formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers;formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>shadows;headers/footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders;for headers/footers</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "inserting;"</comment> +<paragraph id="hd_id3154866" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_with_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp" name="Formatting Headers or Footers">Formatting Headers or Footers</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154243" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item> and select the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the spacing options that you want to use.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147128" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click <item type="menuitem">More</item>. The <item type="menuitem">Border/Background</item> dialog opens.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150520" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the <emph>Line arrangement</emph> area. Click a line style in the <emph>Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153742" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> box, and then enter a value in the<emph> Bottom</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +</body> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp index 493d49be8f..4087575b97 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,49 +16,52 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidehyperlinksxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155845"><bookmark_value>hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>cross-references; inserting with Navigator</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>Navigator;inserting hyperlinks</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "adding;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155845" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="21"><variable id="hyperlinks"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp" name="Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator">Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="20">You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item>, you are taken to the cross-referenced item.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149833" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148846" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">On the Standard bar, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">Drag Mode</item> icon, and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Insert as Hyperlink</item> - is selected.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149635" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="27">The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidehyperlinksxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155845"> + <bookmark_value>hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cross-references; inserting with Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Navigator;inserting hyperlinks</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "adding;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155845" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="hyperlinks"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp" name="Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator">Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item>, you are taken to the cross-referenced item.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149833" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148846" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the Standard bar, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">Drag Mode</item> icon, and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Insert as Hyperlink</item> is selected.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3149635" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp index afc1d83aa5..f8639e5939 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,57 +16,54 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideindices_deletexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155186"><bookmark_value>indexes; editing or deleting entries</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>tables of contents; editing or deleting entries</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>editing;table/index entries</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_deletexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155186"> + <bookmark_value>indexes; editing or deleting entries</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; editing or deleting entries</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;table/index entries</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155186" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="11"><variable id="indices_delete"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp" name="Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries">Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155855" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="12">Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose <item type="menuitem">View</item> - and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Field Shadings</item> - is selected. </paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155507" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155526" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Choose <emph>Edit - Index Entry</emph>, and do one of the following: </paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - -<list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154238" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">To change the entry, enter different text in the <emph>Entry</emph> box.</paragraph> -</listitem> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">To remove the entry, click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> -</listitem> +<paragraph id="hd_id3155186" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_delete"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp" name="Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries">Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155855" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose <item type="menuitem">View</item> and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Field Shadings</item> is selected.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155507" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155526" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Edit - Index Entry</emph>, and do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> </list> +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154238" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the entry, enter different text in the <emph>Entry</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154263" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove the entry, click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155893" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the <link href="text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp" name="Edit Index Entry dialog"><emph>Edit Index Entry</emph> dialog</link>.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155893" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="15">To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the <link href="text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp" name="Edit Index Entry dialog"><emph>Edit Index Entry</emph> dialog</link>.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index 32507abd86..4326fe12d0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,56 +16,59 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideindices_indexxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"><bookmark_value>concordance files;indexes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>indexes; alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_indexxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"> + <bookmark_value>concordance files;indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>indexes; alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="24"><variable id="indices_index"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp" name="Creating Alphabetical Indexes">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">If you want to use a concordance file, select <item type="menuitem">Concordance file</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> - area, click the <item type="menuitem">File</item> button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150223" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150502" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152760" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="38"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp" name="Creating a concordance file">Creating a concordance file</link></paragraph> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_index"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp" name="Creating Alphabetical Indexes">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to use a concordance file, select <item type="menuitem">Concordance file</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> area, click the <item type="menuitem">File</item> button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150223" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150502" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3152760" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp" name="Creating a concordance file">Creating a concordance file</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index 464fd2041a..67fe478095 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,109 +16,111 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideindices_literaturexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating a Bibliography</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"><bookmark_value>indexes;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>databases;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>bibliographies</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>entries;bibliographies</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>storing bibliographic information</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_literaturexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Bibliography</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"> + <bookmark_value>indexes;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>databases;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>entries;bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>storing bibliographic information</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149687" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="46"><variable id="indices_literature"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp" name="Creating a Bibliography">Creating a Bibliography</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155864" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="60">A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153402" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="61">Storing Bibliographic Information</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153414" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="62">$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154244" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" - oldref="63">To Store Information in the Bibliography Database</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><emph>Tools - Bibliography Database</emph></link></paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155900" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>Insert - Record</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="65">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> - box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150219" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="66">Close the - <item type="menuitem">Bibliography Database</item> window. </paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150242" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" - oldref="67">To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150945" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="68">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry"><emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph></link>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150525" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="69">Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153738" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="70">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153763" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="71">Select the publication source for the record in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146873" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="72">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="73">In the <item type="menuitem">Insert Bibliography Entry</item> - dialog, click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp#speicherhinweis"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150741" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="74">Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148402" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="75">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148421" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153231" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147059" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147085" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="76">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156060" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="77"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Bibliography Database">Bibliography Database</link></paragraph> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6367076" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called <link href="http://bibus-biblio.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page">Bibus</link>.</paragraph> - </section> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149687" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_literature"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp" name="Creating a Bibliography">Creating a Bibliography</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155864" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153402" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Storing Bibliographic Information</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153414" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154244" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Store Information in the Bibliography Database</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155872" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><emph>Tools - Bibliography Database</emph></link></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155900" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Record</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150219" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Close the <item type="menuitem">Bibliography Database</item> window.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150242" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150945" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry"><emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150525" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153738" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153763" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the publication source for the record in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Insert Bibliography Entry</item> dialog, click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp#speicherhinweis"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150741" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148402" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148421" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153231" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147059" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147085" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph id="par_id3156060" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Bibliography Database">Bibliography Database</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph id="par_id6367076" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called <link href="http://bibus-biblio.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page">Bibus</link>.</paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index 757a5bcb9d..cd48842be1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,67 +16,70 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - +--> <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideindices_tocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating a Table of Contents</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147104"><bookmark_value>tables of contents; creating and updating</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>updating; tables of contents</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_tocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Table of Contents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147104"> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; creating and updating</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating; tables of contents</bookmark_value> </bookmark> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/tocdialog/TocDialog" id="bm_id3154749" localize="false"/> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147104" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="16"><variable id="indices_toc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp" name="Creating a Table of Contents">Creating a Table of Contents</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <section id="tomanual"> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150942" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="45">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5876949" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Insert a Table of Contents</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150528" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Index/Table"><emph>Index/Table</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153746" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Select "Table of Contents" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146856" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146872" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146896" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the <item type="menuitem">Additional Styles</item> - check box in the <item type="menuitem">Create from</item> area, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Assign styles</item> button next to the check box. In the <item type="menuitem">Assign Styles</item> dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the <item type="menuitem">>></item> - or the <item type="menuitem"><<</item> - button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> - </section> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153148" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="21">To Update a Table of Contents</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153161" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - <list type="unordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153183" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147066" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147104" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_toc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp" name="Creating a Table of Contents">Creating a Table of Contents</link></variable></paragraph> + +<section id="tomanual"> +<paragraph id="par_id3150942" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id5876949" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Table of Contents</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150528" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Index/Table"><emph>Index/Table</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153746" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Table of Contents" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146856" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146872" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3146896" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the <item type="menuitem">Additional Styles</item> check box in the <item type="menuitem">Create from</item> area, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Assign styles</item> button next to the check box. In the <item type="menuitem">Assign Styles</item> dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the <item type="menuitem">>></item> or the <item type="menuitem"><<</item> button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> +</section> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153148" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Update a Table of Contents</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153161" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153183" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147066" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index 728aeb6ed9..9d8f0762d2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,82 +16,81 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - +--> <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideindices_userdefxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">User-Defined Indexes</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154896"><bookmark_value>indexes; creating user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_userdefxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">User-Defined Indexes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154896"> + <bookmark_value>indexes; creating user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154896" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="30"><variable id="indices_userdef"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp" name="User-Defined Indexes">User-Defined Indexes</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155184" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="31">You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155915" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="47">To Create a User-Defined Index</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155867" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="48">Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="50">Click the <item type="menuitem">New User-defined Index</item> button next to the <item type="menuitem">Index</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="51">Type a name for the index in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> - box and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click - <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> to add the selected word(s) to the new index. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147139" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="53">Click - <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150231" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="54">To Insert a User-Defined Index</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click in the document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150952" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150509" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">On the <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="4"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146881" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="56">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150720" role="paragraph">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select <item type="menuitem">Additional styles</item>, and then click the (<item type="menuitem">Assign styles</item>) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the <item type="menuitem">>></item> - or the <item type="menuitem"><<</item> - button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154896" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_userdef"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp" name="User-Defined Indexes">User-Defined Indexes</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155184" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155915" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a User-Defined Index</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155867" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">New User-defined Index</item> button next to the <item type="menuitem">Index</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the index in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> to add the selected word(s) to the new index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147139" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150231" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a User-Defined Index</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150952" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150509" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <item type="menuitem">Index/Table</item> tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146881" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3150720" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select <item type="menuitem">Additional styles</item>, and then click the (<item type="menuitem">Assign styles</item>) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the <item type="menuitem">>></item> or the <item type="menuitem"><<</item> button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp index 166b2520d3..0ef38009a5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,57 +16,60 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidejoin_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Combining Numbered Lists</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150495"><bookmark_value>numbering; combining</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>merging;numbered lists</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>joining;numbered lists</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>lists;combining numbered lists</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidejoin_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Combining Numbered Lists</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150495"> + <bookmark_value>numbering; combining</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>merging;numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>joining;numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lists;combining numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150495" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="32"><variable id="join_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Combining Numbered Lists">Combining Numbered Lists</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149692" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="33">You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149452" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="34">To Combine Consecutive Numbered Lists</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154479" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Select all of the paragraphs in the lists.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155911" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="36">On the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> - icon twice.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155870" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="37">To Create a Numbered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs:</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149644" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145102" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">On the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> - icon twice.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> - <embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150495" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="join_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Combining Numbered Lists">Combining Numbered Lists</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149692" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149452" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Combine Consecutive Numbered Lists</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154479" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select all of the paragraphs in the lists.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155911" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> icon twice.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155870" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Numbered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs:</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149644" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145102" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> icon twice.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp index c6749520f3..cf7bd0997d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,68 +16,66 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidenumber_sequencexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Defining Number Ranges</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"><bookmark_value>numbering;quotations/similar items</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="36"><variable id="number_sequence"><link href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp" name="Defining Number Ranges">Defining Number Ranges</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155918" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="37">You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155048" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Click "Number range" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="61">Type "Quotation" in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153387" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="62">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> + <topic id="textswriterguidenumber_sequencexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Number Ranges</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> -<list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Type a number in the <emph>Value</emph> box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering.</paragraph> -</listitem> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154851" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="58">Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the <emph>Level </emph>box.</paragraph> -</listitem> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"> + <bookmark_value>numbering;quotations/similar items</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="number_sequence"><link href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp" name="Defining Number Ranges">Defining Number Ranges</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155918" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155048" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Fields - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> </list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Number range" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type "Quotation" in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153387" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154250" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a number in the <emph>Value</emph> box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154851" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the <emph>Level </emph>box.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +</body> - <list type="ordered" startwith="6"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> - <embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp index 275a6dfdee..b2b5505d70 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,114 +16,117 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidenumbering_linesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Adding Line Numbers</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150101"><bookmark_value>line numbers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>text; line numbers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>paragraphs;line numbers</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>lines of text; numbering</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>numbering; lines</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>numbers; line numbering</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>marginal numbers on text pages</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW added "paragraphs;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150101" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="3"><variable id="numbering_lines"><link href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp" name="Adding Line Numbers">Adding Line Numbers</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149842" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="1">$[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7184972" role="note" l10n="NEW">Line numbers are not available in HTML format.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153410" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="6">To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149640" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149612" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>, and then select the options that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156241" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="10">To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156264" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153385" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+T</caseinline><defaultinline>F11</defaultinline></switchinline> to open the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, and then click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154853" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="13">Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150222" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="17">All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150956" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">In the <item type="menuitem">Line Numbering</item> - area, clear the <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item> - check box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150520" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151077" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151096" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153733" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Select <emph>Include this paragraph in line numbering</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153758" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146864" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3146880" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="25">To Specify the Starting Line Number</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150703" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="26">Click in a paragraph.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150721" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="27">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> - tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148389" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">Select the <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item> - check box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148414" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">Select <item type="menuitem">Restart at the paragraph</item> - check box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153779" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="30">Enter a line number in the <item type="menuitem">Start with</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153804" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="31">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153934" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="5"><link href="text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp" name="Tools - Line Numbering">Tools - Line Numbering</link></paragraph> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153960" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="32"><link href="text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp" name="Format - Paragraph - Numbering">Format - Paragraph - Numbering</link></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2212591" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW"><link href="http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Setting_up_a_Style_for_Numbering_Lines_in_Code_Listings">Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles</link></paragraph> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidenumbering_linesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Line Numbers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150101"> + <bookmark_value>line numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; line numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;line numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines of text; numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbering; lines</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbers; line numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>marginal numbers on text pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW added "paragraphs;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150101" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="numbering_lines"><link href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp" name="Adding Line Numbers">Adding Line Numbers</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149842" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id7184972" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">Line numbers are not available in HTML format.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153410" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149640" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149612" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>, and then select the options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3156241" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156264" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153385" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+T +</caseinline><defaultinline>F11</defaultinline></switchinline> to open the <emph>Styles and Formatting</emph> window, and then click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154853" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3150222" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150956" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Line Numbering</item> area, clear the <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150520" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151077" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151096" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153733" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Include this paragraph in line numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153758" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3146864" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3146880" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Specify the Starting Line Number</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150703" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in a paragraph.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150721" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148389" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148414" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <item type="menuitem">Restart at the paragraph</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153779" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a line number in the <item type="menuitem">Start with</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153804" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3153934" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp" name="Tools - Line Numbering">Tools - Line Numbering</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3153960" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp" name="Format - Paragraph - Numbering">Format - Paragraph - Numbering</link></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id2212591" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Setting_up_a_Style_for_Numbering_Lines_in_Code_Listings">Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles</link></paragraph> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 6230cb70be..5fab00588d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,122 +16,123 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidepagebackgroundxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Changing Page Backgrounds</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id8431653"><bookmark_value>page styles;backgrounds</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>backgrounds; different pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>changing;page backgrounds</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>pages;backgrounds</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "page backgrounds"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107F4" role="heading" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="pagebackground"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp">Changing Page Background</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10812" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph> - <section id="define"> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10820" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10827" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1082F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10837" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1083F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1084B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> + <topic id="textswriterguidepagebackgroundxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing Page Backgrounds</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> -<list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10855" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph> -</listitem> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10859" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph> -</listitem> -</list> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id8431653"> + <bookmark_value>page styles;backgrounds</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>backgrounds; different pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;page backgrounds</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;backgrounds</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "page backgrounds"</comment> +<paragraph id="par_idN107F4" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="pagebackground"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp">Changing Page Background</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN10812" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph> +<section id="define"> - <list type="ordered" startwith="6"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1085F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10867" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1086B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - </section> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1087A" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1087E" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10892" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1089A" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108A2" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108A5" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108A9" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108BD" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108C1" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108C9" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108D1" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> - box, select a page style that uses the page background.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> +<paragraph id="par_idN10820" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Page Background</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10827" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1082F" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10837" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1083F" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1084B" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> <list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN108DB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph> -</listitem> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108DF" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph> -<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN108E2" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph> -</listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10855" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10859" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1085F" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10867" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1086B" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +</section> + +<paragraph id="par_idN1087A" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN1087E" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10892" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1089A" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108A2" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply.</paragraph> + </listitem> </list> +<paragraph id="par_idN108A5" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN108A9" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108BD" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108C1" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108C9" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108D1" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box, select a page style that uses the page background.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108DB" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108DF" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_idN108E2" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108E8" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> - <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108E8" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index c3aab03ad0..31101c75db 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,107 +16,103 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidepagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating and Applying Page Styles</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id7071138"><bookmark_value>page styles;creating and applying</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>defining;page styles</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>styles;for pages</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155182" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and Applying Page Styles">Creating and Applying Page Styles</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="10">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1071A" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW" localize="false" > - <embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/> - </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10722" role="paragraph" l10n="NEW" localize="false" > - <embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#pagebackground"/> - </paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156109" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="11">To Define a New Page Style</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153411" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="3">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>. - </paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> + <topic id="textswriterguidepagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating and Applying Page Styles</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id7071138"> + <bookmark_value>page styles;creating and applying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles;for pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;"</comment> +<paragraph id="hd_id3155182" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and Applying Page Styles">Creating and Applying Page Styles</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN1071A" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"> <embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN10722" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"> <embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#pagebackground"/></paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3156109" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Define a New Page Style</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153411" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> <list type="unordered"> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box.</paragraph> -</listitem> -<listitem> -<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153376" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style.</paragraph> -</listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153376" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> </list> +<paragraph id="hd_id3154851" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Apply a Page Style</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Page Style</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click a name in the list.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="hd_id3148701" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Apply a Page Style to a New Page</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147122" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want a new page to start.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150210" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150235" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150939" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150965" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp#pagenumbers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp#template_default"/> +</body> - <list type="ordered" startwith="6"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154851" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="21">To Apply a Page Style</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154873" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="23">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the - <item type="menuitem">Page Style</item> icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Double-click a name in the list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148701" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="18">To Apply a Page Style to a New Page</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147122" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Click in the document where you want a new page to start.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150210" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150235" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150939" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> - box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150965" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp#pagenumbers"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp#template_default"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp index 0b422f77ec..9b20d9c784 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,49 +16,52 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideprinter_trayxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Selecting printer paper trays</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id6609088"><bookmark_value>selecting;paper trays</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>paper tray selection</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155909" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="printer_tray"><link href="text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp" name="Selecting printer paper trays">Selecting Printer Paper Trays</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149841" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> - icon.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155066" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">In the <item type="menuitem">Paper tray</item> - box, select the paper tray that you want to use.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149649" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="12">Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149616" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Apply the page style to the pages that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp#print_preview"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154260" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="13"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and applying page styles">Creating and applying page styles</link></paragraph> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguideprinter_trayxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Selecting printer paper trays</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id6609088"> + <bookmark_value>selecting;paper trays</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paper tray selection</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155909" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="printer_tray"><link href="text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp" name="Selecting printer paper trays">Selecting Printer Paper Trays</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149841" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155066" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Paper tray</item> box, select the paper tray that you want to use.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149649" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149616" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Apply the page style to the pages that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp#print_preview"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3154260" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and applying page styles">Creating and applying page styles</link></paragraph> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp index 43f403c576..612e99a6c4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,113 +16,118 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidereferencesxml" indexer="include"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting Cross-References</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145087"><bookmark_value>references; inserting cross-references</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>cross-references; inserting and updating</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>tables; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>pictures; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>objects; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>OLE objects;cross-referencing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>draw objects;cross-referencing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>updating;cross-references</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>inserting;cross-references</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidereferencesxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Cross-References</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145087"> + <bookmark_value>references; inserting cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cross-references; inserting and updating</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pictures; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>OLE objects;cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>draw objects;cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating;cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;cross-references</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145087" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="28"><variable id="references"><link href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp" name="Inserting Cross-References">Inserting Cross-References</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159263" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as <link href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp" name="fields">fields</link> in the document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155860" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="21">Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149833" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="38">Cross-Referencing Text</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="39">Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156105" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" - oldref="52">To Insert a Target</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153408" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="40">Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153125" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="41">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="42">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list, select “Set Reference”.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Type a name for the target in the <emph>Name</emph> box. The selected text is displayed in the <emph>Value</emph> box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>. The name of the target is added to the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156257" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="45">Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153370" role="heading" level="3" l10n="U" - oldref="53">To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7032074" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7796868" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph> to open the dialog, if it is not open already.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153392" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select "Insert Reference".</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154256" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="47">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the target that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154856" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="48">In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format for the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149980" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="29">Cross-Referencing an Object</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149992" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="30">You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose <link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Insert - Caption"><emph>Insert - Caption</emph></link>.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="14">Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150212" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150236" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select the caption category of the object.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150942" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150968" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="34">In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format of the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150535" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151092" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="55">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151115" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="56">Updating Cross-References</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153594" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="51">To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Fields</emph> from the menu or press F9.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7321390" role="tip" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>View - Fields</emph> to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp#references_modify"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> - <embed href="text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp#hyperlink_insert"/> - </body> -</helpdocument> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145087" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="references"><link href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp" name="Inserting Cross-References">Inserting Cross-References</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3159263" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as <link href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp" name="fields">fields</link> in the document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155860" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149833" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Cross-Referencing Text</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3156105" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Target</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153408" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153125" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list, select “Set Reference”.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the target in the <emph>Name</emph> box. The selected text is displayed in the <emph>Value</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>. The name of the target is added to the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3156257" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153370" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7032074" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7796868" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph> to open the dialog, if it is not open already.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153392" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select "Insert Reference".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154256" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the target that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154856" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format for the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149980" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Cross-Referencing an Object</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149992" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose <link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Insert - Caption"><emph>Insert - Caption</emph></link>.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150212" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150236" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select the caption category of the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150942" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150968" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Insert reference to</emph> list, select the format of the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150535" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151092" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3151115" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Updating Cross-References</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153594" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Fields</emph> from the menu or press F9.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id7321390" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>View - Fields</emph> to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp#references_modify"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp#hyperlink_insert"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp index 0249ed3aac..162a328fec 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,39 +16,43 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidereferences_modifyxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Modifying Cross-References</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149291"><bookmark_value>references; modifying cross-references</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>cross-references; modifying</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>editing;cross-references</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>searching;cross-references</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidereferences_modifyxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Modifying Cross-References</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149291"> + <bookmark_value>references; modifying cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cross-references; modifying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>searching;cross-references</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149291" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="6"><variable id="references_modify"><link href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp" name="Modifying Cross-References">Modifying Cross-References</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153132" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="2">Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="3">If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose <emph>View - Field Shadings</emph> or press <emph>Ctrl+F8</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Set the options that you want, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="5">Use the arrow buttons in the <item type="menuitem">Edit Fields</item> - dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp#references"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149291" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="references_modify"><link href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp" name="Modifying Cross-References">Modifying Cross-References</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153132" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose <emph>View - Field Shadings</emph> or press <emph>Ctrl+F8</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the options that you want, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">Use the arrow buttons in the <item type="menuitem">Edit Fields</item> dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp#references"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp index f69eb61bd0..57e9bca3a4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,83 +16,82 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidesection_insertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting Sections</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"><bookmark_value>sections; inserting</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>inserting; sections</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>HTML documents;inserting linked sections</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>updating;linked sections, manually</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>links;inserting sections</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidesection_insertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Sections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"> + <bookmark_value>sections; inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting; sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>HTML documents;inserting linked sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating;linked sections, manually</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>links;inserting sections</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="16"><variable id="section_insert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp" name="Inserting Sections">Inserting Sections</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155917" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="26">You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155863" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="27">To Insert a New Section</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149843" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="23">Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156103" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="28">If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="24">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="29">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> - box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="25">Set the options for the section, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149635" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="30">To Insert a Section as a Link</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149648" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="31">Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="18">When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Links</emph>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149860" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22">You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145104" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="34">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> - box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153387" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> - area, select the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> - check box. <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">Under Windows, you can also select the <item type="menuitem">DDE</item> check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="section_insert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp" name="Inserting Sections">Inserting Sections</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155917" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155863" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a New Section</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149843" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3156103" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153404" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the options for the section, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149635" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Section as a Link</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149648" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149611" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Links</emph>.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149860" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145104" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153387" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> area, select the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> check box. <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">Under Windows, you can also select the <item type="menuitem">DDE</item> check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. </caseinline></switchinline></paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154852" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click the browse button (<item type="menuitem">...</item>) next to the <item type="menuitem">File name</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155882" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149978" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> - box, select the section that you want to insert.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150003" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp#sections"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp#section_edit"/> - </body> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154852" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the browse button (<item type="menuitem">...</item>) next to the <item type="menuitem">File name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155882" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149978" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> box, select the section that you want to insert.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150003" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp#sections"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp#section_edit"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp index a4385389d5..ddba944b19 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,39 +16,43 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidesend2htmlxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Saving Text Documents in HTML Format</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145087"><bookmark_value>text documents; publishing in HTML</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>HTML documents; creating from text documents</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>homepage creation</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>saving;in HTML format</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidesend2htmlxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Saving Text Documents in HTML Format</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145087"> + <bookmark_value>text documents; publishing in HTML</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>HTML documents; creating from text documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>homepage creation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>saving;in HTML format</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145087" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="send2html"><link href="text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp" name="Saving Text Documents in HTML Format">Saving Text Documents in HTML Format</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149825" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155922" role="paragraph">When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156100" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <emph>File - Send - Create HTML Document</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">In the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> - box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153407" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145087" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="send2html"><link href="text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp" name="Saving Text Documents in HTML Format">Saving Text Documents in HTML Format</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149825" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155922" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156100" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Send - Create HTML Document</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153407" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp index 4cc31c9090..ee8f78feb6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,50 +16,53 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - +--> <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidespellcheck_dialogxml" indexer="include"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Checking Spelling and Grammar</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149684"><bookmark_value>spellcheck; checking text documents manually</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>checking spelling;manually</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>grammar checker</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw added "grammar checker"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149684" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="37"><variable id="spellcheck_dialog"><link href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp" name="Checking Spelling and Grammar">Checking Spelling and Grammar</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149814" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0525200902184476" role="note" l10n="NEW">To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the <link href="http://extensions.libreoffice.org/dictionary">extensions web page</link>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149828" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="10">The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Spelling and Grammar</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156104" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="45">When a possible spelling error is encountered, the <item type="menuitem">Spellcheck</item> - dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149861" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="46">Do one of the following:</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145099" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="47">To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="48">Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click <emph>Add to Dictionary</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/> -<comment>removed a line</comment> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147107" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="49"><link href="text/shared/01/06010000.xhp" name="Spellcheck dialog">Spelling and Grammar dialog</link></paragraph> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp#using_thesaurus"/> - </section> - </body> -</helpdocument> + <topic id="textswriterguidespellcheck_dialogxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Checking Spelling and Grammar</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149684"> + <bookmark_value>spellcheck; checking text documents manually</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>checking spelling;manually</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>grammar checker</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw added "grammar checker"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149684" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="spellcheck_dialog"><link href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp" name="Checking Spelling and Grammar">Checking Spelling and Grammar</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149814" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id0525200902184476" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the <link href="http://extensions.libreoffice.org/dictionary">extensions web page</link>.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149828" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Spelling and Grammar</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156104" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">When a possible spelling error is encountered, the <item type="menuitem">Spellcheck</item> dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149861" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3145099" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click <emph>Add to Dictionary</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/><comment>removed a line</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id3147107" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/06010000.xhp" name="Spellcheck dialog">Spelling and Grammar dialog</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp#using_thesaurus"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp index a0abbedf31..7d30c8db06 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,70 +16,74 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidestylist_fromselectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating New Styles From Selections</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"><bookmark_value>styles; creating from selections</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>drag and drop;creating new styles</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>copying;styles, from selections</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="34"><variable id="stylist_fromselect"><link href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp" name="Creating New Styles From Selections">Creating New Styles From Selections</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="35">To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156097" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="36">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153402" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">Click the icon of the style category that you want to create.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153119" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153138" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="38">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">New Style from Selection</item> icon and choose <item type="menuitem">New Style from Selection</item> - from the submenu</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156260" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="43">Type a name in the <item type="menuitem">Style Name</item> - box.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154411" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="44">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153373" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="20">To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="31">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154258" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the icon of the style category that you want to create.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154851" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="32">Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154871" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107B2" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107B5" role="note" l10n="NEW">You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149988" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="40"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Styles and Formatting">Styles and Formatting</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidestylist_fromselectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating New Styles From Selections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"> + <bookmark_value>styles; creating from selections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>drag and drop;creating new styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>copying;styles, from selections</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="stylist_fromselect"><link href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp" name="Creating New Styles From Selections">Creating New Styles From Selections</link></variable></paragraph> + +<paragraph id="par_id3149829" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156097" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153402" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the icon of the style category that you want to create.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153119" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153138" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">New Style from Selection</item> icon and choose <item type="menuitem">New Style from Selection</item> from the submenu</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156260" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name in the <item type="menuitem">Style Name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154411" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153373" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154258" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the icon of the style category that you want to create.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154851" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154871" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_idN107B2" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_idN107B5" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3149988" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Styles and Formatting">Styles and Formatting</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp index de5e782961..7818ce526c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,45 +16,46 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidetable_repeat_multiple_headersxml" indexer="include" - status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Repeating a Table Header on a New Page</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155870"><bookmark_value>tables; heading repetition after page breaks</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>repeating; table headings after page breaks</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>headings; repeating in tables</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>multi-page tables</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"</comment><comment>mw added "multi-page tables"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155870" role="paragraph" l10n="E" oldref="5" - localize="false"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153406" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="6"><variable id="table_repeat_multiple_headers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp" name="Repeating a Table Header on a New Page">Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149636" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="7">You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145098" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="8">Choose <emph>Table - Insert - Table</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">Select the <item type="menuitem">Heading</item> - and the <item type="menuitem">Repeat heading</item> - check boxes.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153376" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Select the number of rows and columns for the table.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153393" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidetable_repeat_multiple_headersxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Repeating a Table Header on a New Page</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155870"> + <bookmark_value>tables; heading repetition after page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>repeating; table headings after page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headings; repeating in tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>multi-page tables</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"</comment><comment>mw added "multi-page tables"</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id3155870" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153406" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="table_repeat_multiple_headers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp" name="Repeating a Table Header on a New Page">Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149636" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145098" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Table - Insert - Table</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the <item type="menuitem">Heading</item> and the <item type="menuitem">Repeat heading</item> check boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153376" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the number of rows and columns for the table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153393" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp index e0fb7d0533..412323b21f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,50 +16,51 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidetemplate_createxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating a Document Template</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149688"><bookmark_value>document templates</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>templates; creating document templates</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidetemplate_createxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Document Template</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149688"> + <bookmark_value>document templates</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>templates; creating document templates</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149688" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="62"><variable id="template_create"><link href="text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp" name="Creating a Document Template">Creating a Document Template</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149492" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="63">You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155915" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="64">Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147422" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="65">Choose <emph>File - Save As Template</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="66">In the <item type="menuitem">New Template</item> - box, type a name for the new template.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156098" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="70">Select a template category in the <item type="menuitem">Categories</item> - list.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="71">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="67">To create a document based on the template, choose - <item type="menuitem">File - New - Templates</item>, select the template, and then click - <item type="menuitem">Open</item>.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp#template_default"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp#load_styles"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149636" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="68"><link href="text/shared/01/01110300.xhp" name="File - Save As Template">File - Save As Template</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> -</helpdocument> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149688" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="template_create"><link href="text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp" name="Creating a Document Template">Creating a Document Template</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149492" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155915" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147422" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Save As Template</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">New Template</item> box, type a name for the new template.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156098" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select a template category in the <item type="menuitem">Categories</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3153404" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To create a document based on the template, choose <item type="menuitem">File - New - Templates</item>, select the template, and then click <item type="menuitem">Open</item>.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp#template_default"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp#load_styles"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3149636" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/01110300.xhp" name="File - Save As Template">File - Save As Template</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp index ddf371599e..84dc222a9f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,39 +16,41 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidetext_animationxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Animating Text</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151182"><bookmark_value>text animation</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>effects; text animation</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>animations;text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw made "animating text" a two level entry</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151182" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="17"><variable id="text_animation"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp" name="Animating Text">Animating Text</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145080" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="18">You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149811" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155178" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="20">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Object - Text Attributes</item>, and then click the - <item type="menuitem">Text Animation</item> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149819" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">In the <item type="menuitem">Effect</item> - box, select the animation that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145786" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="22">Set the properties of the effect, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_animationxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Animating Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151182"> + <bookmark_value>text animation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>effects; text animation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>animations;text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw made "animating text" a two level entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3151182" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="text_animation"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp" name="Animating Text">Animating Text</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145080" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149811" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155178" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Object - Text Attributes</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Text Animation</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149819" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Effect</item> box, select the animation that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145786" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the properties of the effect, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 75bbea1576..41ec84f28d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,54 +16,51 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidetext_centervertxml" indexer="include"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155177"><bookmark_value>text frames; centering on pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>centering;text frames on pages</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>title pages; centering text on</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_centervertxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155177"> + <bookmark_value>text frames; centering on pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>centering;text frames on pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>title pages; centering text on</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155177" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="94"><variable id="text_centervert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp" name="Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155920" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="78">Select the text that you want to center on the page.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="79">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152765" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="82">In the <item type="menuitem">Anchor</item> - area, select <item type="menuitem">To page</item>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149844" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="95">In the <item type="menuitem">Size</item> - area, set the dimensions of the frame.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156114" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="96">In the <item type="menuitem">Position</item> - area, select "Center" in the <item type="menuitem">Horizontal</item> - and <item type="menuitem">Vertical</item> - boxes.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="97">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149615" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="84">To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Frame/Object</item>. Click the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> tab, and then click in the - <item type="menuitem">Set No Border</item> box in the - <item type="menuitem">Line Arrangement</item> area.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145098" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="83">To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame.</paragraph> - <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155177" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="text_centervert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp" name="Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155920" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text that you want to center on the page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3152765" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Anchor</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">To page</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149844" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Size</item> area, set the dimensions of the frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Position</item> area, select "Center" in the <item type="menuitem">Horizontal</item> and <item type="menuitem">Vertical</item> boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3149615" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Frame/Object</item>. Click the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> tab, and then click in the <item type="menuitem">Set No Border</item> box in the <item type="menuitem">Line Arrangement</item> area.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145098" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 45ef5bfdcc..9da6f39ca7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,49 +16,49 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - - +--> + <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidetext_rotatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Rotating Text</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"><bookmark_value>text; rotating</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>rotating;text</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_rotatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Rotating Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"> + <bookmark_value>text; rotating</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>rotating;text</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" - oldref="65"><variable id="text_rotate"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp" name="Rotating Text">Rotating Text</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147410" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="66">You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153130" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="67">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Toolbars- Drawing</item> to open the <item type="menuitem">Drawing</item> - toolbar.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149866" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="68">Select the <link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Text"><item type="menuitem">Text</item></link> icon -<image id="img_id3149600" src="cmd/sc_texttoolbox.png" width="0.222in" height="0.222in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3149600">Icon</alt> - </image>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149590" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="69">Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154415" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="71">Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the <link href="text/shared/02/05090000.xhp" name="Object Rotation Mode"><item type="menuitem">Rotate</item></link> icon -<image id="img_id3145405" src="cmd/sc_toggleobjectrotatemode.png" width="0.222in" height="0.222in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3145405">Icon</alt> - </image> on the <item type="menuitem">Drawing Object Properties</item> toolbar.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="72">Drag one of the corner handles of the text object.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154844" role="tip" l10n="U" oldref="73">You can also right-click the text object, choose <emph>Position and Size</emph>, click the <emph>Rotation</emph> tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155888" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="74"><link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Show Draw Functions">Show Draw Functions</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="text_rotate"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp" name="Rotating Text">Rotating Text</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147410" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153130" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Toolbars- Drawing</item> to open the <item type="menuitem">Drawing</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149866" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the <link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Text"><item type="menuitem">Text</item></link> icon <image id="img_id3149600" src="cmd/sc_texttoolbox.png" width="0.564cm" height="0.564cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3149600">Icon</alt></image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149590" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154415" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the <link href="text/shared/02/05090000.xhp" name="Object Rotation Mode"><item type="menuitem">Rotate</item></link> icon <image id="img_id3145405" src="cmd/sc_toggleobjectrotatemode.png" width="0.564cm" height="0.564cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3145405">Icon</alt></image> on the <item type="menuitem">Drawing Object Properties</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag one of the corner handles of the text object.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3154844" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">You can also right-click the text object, choose <emph>Position and Size</emph>, click the <emph>Rotation</emph> tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3155888" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Show Draw Functions">Show Draw Functions</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp index e2eeabc997..171a383e77 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,50 +16,54 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - +--> <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguideusing_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Adding Bullets</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155186"><bookmark_value>bullet lists;turning on and off</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>paragraphs; bulleted</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>bullets;adding and editing</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>formatting;bullets</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>removing;bullets in text documents</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>changing;bulleting symbols</bookmark_value> -</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "editing;" and "adding;"</comment> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155186" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="6"><variable id="using_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Adding Bullets">Adding Bullets</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3291116" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Add Bullets</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149635" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="16">On the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Bullets On/Off</item> icon -<image id="img_id3156108" src="cmd/sc_defaultbullet.png" width="0.1665in" height="0.1665in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3156108">Icon</alt> - </image>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145403" role="note" l10n="CHG" oldref="17">To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Bullets On/Off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154403" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="26">To Format Bullets</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154416" role="paragraph" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153390" role="paragraph">For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab, click the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> button next to <item type="menuitem">Character</item>, and then select a special character. You can also click the <item type="menuitem">Image</item> tab, and then click a symbol style in the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> - area.</paragraph> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> - <embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp#numbering_paras"/> - </section> - </body> + <topic id="textswriterguideusing_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Bullets</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155186"> + <bookmark_value>bullet lists;turning on and off</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs; bulleted</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bullets;adding and editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;bullets</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>removing;bullets in text documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;bulleting symbols</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "editing;" and "adding;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155186" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="using_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Adding Bullets">Adding Bullets</link></variable></paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3291116" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Add Bullets</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149635" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Bullets On/Off</item> icon <image id="img_id3156108" src="cmd/sc_defaultbullet.png" width="0.423cm" height="0.423cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3156108">Icon</alt></image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3145403" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Bullets On/Off</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154403" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Format Bullets</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154416" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153390" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab, click the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> button next to <item type="menuitem">Character</item>, and then select a special character. You can also click the <item type="menuitem">Image</item> tab, and then click a symbol style in the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> area.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp#numbering_paras"/> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp index 2b3374c710..0c25534192 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,7 @@ </variable></paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149818" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="26">You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6140629" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Apply Numbering Manually</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155866" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> - icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155866" role="listitem" l10n="CHG" oldref="33">To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering On/Off</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> Bar.</paragraph> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153405" role="note" l10n="U" oldref="27">You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> <list type="unordered"> <listitem> @@ -47,10 +46,10 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1072B" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1072F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1072F" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10733" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10733" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10737" role="listitem" l10n="NEW">To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a format.</paragraph> @@ -62,15 +61,13 @@ <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153137" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="31">Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated.</paragraph> <list type="ordered"> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149646" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> - icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149646" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="35">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Styles and Formatting</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149599" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="36">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149850" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Click the <item type="menuitem">Outline & Numbering</item> - tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149850" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="37">Click the <item type="menuitem">Outline & Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> </listitem> <listitem> <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149874" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbering Style</item> box, select the type of numbering that you want to use.</paragraph> diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index c3c250be18..d6bfee85be 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <helpdocument version="1.0"> - <!-- * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. * @@ -17,76 +16,85 @@ * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . - --> - +--> <meta> - <topic id="textswriterguidewrapxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> - <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Wrapping Text Around Objects</title> - <filename>/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp</filename> - </topic> - </meta> - <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154486"><bookmark_value>text wrap around objects</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>contour editor</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>contour wrap</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>text; formatting around objects</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>formatting; contour wrap</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>objects; contour wrap</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>wrapping text;editing contours</bookmark_value> - <bookmark_value>editors;contour editor</bookmark_value> + <topic id="textswriterguidewrapxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Wrapping Text Around Objects</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154486"> + <bookmark_value>text wrap around objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>contour editor</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>contour wrap</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; formatting around objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting; contour wrap</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; contour wrap</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>wrapping text;editing contours</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editors;contour editor</bookmark_value> </bookmark> -<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154486" role="heading" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="8"><variable id="wrap"><link href="text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp" name="Wrapping Text Around Objects">Wrapping Text Around Objects</link> -</variable></paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4792321" role="heading" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Wrap Text Around an Object</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149696" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="9">Select the object.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="10">Choose <emph>Format - Frame and Objects - Properties</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="4">The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149834" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="14">To Specify the Wrapping Properties</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154079" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the object.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <emph>Format - Image - Properties</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153370" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="5">Set the options that you want.</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153386" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="16">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154247" role="heading" level="2" l10n="U" - oldref="17">To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic</paragraph> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154262" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="18">You can change the shape that the text wraps around.</paragraph> - <list type="ordered"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154860" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <list type="ordered" startwith="2"> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150231" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="7">Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Apply</item> - icon (green check mark).</paragraph> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150947" role="listitem" l10n="U" oldref="21">Close the <item type="menuitem">Contour Editor</item> - window.</paragraph> - </listitem> - </list> - <section id="relatedtopics"> - <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> - <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150520" role="paragraph" l10n="U" oldref="22"><link href="text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp" name="Contour Editor">Contour Editor</link></paragraph> - </section> - </body> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154486" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="wrap"><link href="text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp" name="Wrapping Text Around Objects">Wrapping Text Around Objects</link></variable></paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id4792321" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Wrap Text Around an Object</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149696" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Frame and Objects - Properties</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149834" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Specify the Wrapping Properties</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154079" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Image - Properties</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153370" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153386" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154247" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154262" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can change the shape that the text wraps around.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154860" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150231" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Apply</item> icon (green check mark).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150947" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Close the <item type="menuitem">Contour Editor</item> window.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3150520" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp" name="Contour Editor">Contour Editor</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + </helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file |